JP2021176606A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To promptly display information on the number of game medium which a player acquires.SOLUTION: A game machine which gives a game value to a player comprises: control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling progress of a game; display means for displaying information on the given game value; prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls which a player acquires in a predetermined timing; and consumed ball detection means for detecting a consumption ball consumed by the player. The control means, when a predetermined timing and detection of the consumption ball by the consumed ball detection means occur within the same repetition, counts the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls within the same repetition, and calculates information on the game value, using the counted number of prize balls and the consumed balls.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachinko machines") and rotating cylinder type gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachislot machines").

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines, game value is given to the player based on the result of a lottery executed by the main control device when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Further, Patent Document 1 describes a pachinko gaming machine that notifies the number of gaming media acquired by a player in a special state such as during a big hit.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-104329

As with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the notification of information regarding the given gaming medium is useful information.

It is useful information and should be displayed appropriately and promptly.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that displays useful information appropriately and quickly.

A game machine that gives a game value to a player, a control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game, a display means that displays information about the given game value, and a predetermined number of prize balls. The control means includes a prize ball detecting means for detecting that a prize has been won in the winning opening and a consumption ball detecting means for detecting a consumption ball consumed by the player, and the control means detects the winning ball by the prize ball detecting means and the consumption ball. When the detection by the detection means occurs in one timer interrupt process, it is possible to count the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls in the one timer interrupt process, and the numbers are counted in the one timer interrupt process. When the result is reflected, if it cannot be processed within the one timer interrupt process, the counted result is reflected based on a predetermined priority, and the reflected result is used to relate to the game value. A gaming machine characterized by calculating information.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that appropriately and quickly displays useful information.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. The handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door frame 5 into the game area, and the plate unit 200 that receives the game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal displays 1600, 3114, and 244, the accessory ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonus balls acquired by the total number of balls acquired. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said that the pachinko machine is not in good condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the accessory ratio by changing the mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the parts that have been made from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in order to make the game machine 1 look low in gambling, and the game machine 1 can be accurately modified. Can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thinly, the accessory ratio indicator is formed. The ratio indicator 1317 may be easily seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole in which the accessory ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio indicator 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect) It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided on the peripheral control unit 1500, the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal taxiway and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. It includes a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

On the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting the game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a, it outputs a signal. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls are not detected, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of pending numbers, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is used to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. The first prize-winning door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state with the first prize-winning door 2005 closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a precision liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and the like are built, and an input / output device (I). / O device) main control I / O port 1314, main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and main control It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower prize opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, arithmetic circuit 13121, and reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data required when the program is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, the clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 27) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates the ROM 1313 with a predetermined code to see if it has been tampered with. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an illegal program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and an accessory ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. It has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the error detection code in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling the transmission of data. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the even-number display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, in the left-right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no free space in the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142, so that the transmission data register 3142 It may be determined that no data has been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment that is easily affected by noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is executed. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. Further, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Is returned to normal, so it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referred to for confirming the transmission status. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating SnTC transmission completion, 0 indicating transmission in progress, and 1 indicating transmission completion. Bit 6: In SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), which is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. NS.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is set to, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like, and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the sound signal as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 59. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game production output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. And set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game production.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the speaker 921 in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate the number of sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received by the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 can display the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the command in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device). ), The door frame side decorative substrate 233 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game, are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be generated. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 60 can be accepted was input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 60 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 59 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 59 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 59, in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 59. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Make a backup by copying to each of the 1 area and the backup 2nd area.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 59, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer holds the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a length of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And the sub-scan which repeats the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are nailed. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guidance portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guidance portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guidance portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. Be released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, and for example, the time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the first special lottery after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. The lottery of the second special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). The results of the second special lottery, which is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004, include "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated for 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / close pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not the above-mentioned time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in a non-time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state (the state in which both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested). When a new game ball is received in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the result of the second special lottery are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being held. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). It should be noted that the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board according to the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off after a normal process such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 21).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, 2 and N, and which is first determined to be normal, in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

The accessory ratio calculation area is separate from the check code judgment result when the power is turned on. The accessory ratio calculation area is separate from the check code judgment result when the power is turned on. The data in the calculation area 13128 may be deleted. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of launched balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. When the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine modified to a state in which the accessory ratio is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU) when the power recovery setting or the RWM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set to allow interrupts. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on commands include the power-on state buffer command and the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the game state when returning after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the gaming machine 1 is completed by the processing from the power-on of the gaming machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power off processing is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process determined by the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, there is a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on the read input information, or a board of a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 951. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as the game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 (see FIG. 25). Is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 26) determined by the game state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the probability variation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted in the start winning opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the game state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the prize ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the prize ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 23 and 24). Is called, and the bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the gaming machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

If the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed. You may. Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed. Since the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. doing. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource can be reduced without consuming CPU resources by division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 23 and 24. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation. Further, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317. It may be displayed.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as signals, time-saving and medium-time information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 performs the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
23 and 24 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside the range) of a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the accessory ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area each time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and the bonus ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit operations, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the acquired spheres stored in 32 bits for operation. It is advisable to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio is set to 99, and when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas is abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off during the process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When 3 or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 26). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, it is useful when normal power failure processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. Data for calculating the object ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 25A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing the data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the game machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of game machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions that are used only when debugging the game machine 1 other than the game control of the game machine 1. The code for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. In addition, a program for calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection and game control code 13131 of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored. Can be performed separately from the inspection of the game machine 1, and the labor of the inspection of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 25B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. It may be set in step S50 to step S54) of 21. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 19). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step in FIG. 20). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 21). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 24).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) at the time of the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 23) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be standardized even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 23) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are converted into the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated bonus / continuous bonus ratio data is read out in the bonus ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process when displaying the bonus ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 26 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a moving accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numbers up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 26B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls for the character, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of jackpots of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 26 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 26 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize in a prize opening other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. Regarding the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination are obtained. The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 26C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. , Others The number of winning openings, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls of special electric accessory, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of jackpots of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired by the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired by the starting port, and the number of balls acquired by the other winning openings are each in a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting port The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning openings won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 249497295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative and total cumulative totals of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 26 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 26 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than the accessory (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired by the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting port 2004 in which the second starting port door member 2549 is open) which is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The number of winning balls at the starting port is the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize at the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of balls won by other winning openings is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize in a winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not a character (does not operate) and does not trigger a lottery of special symbols. The number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting port acquisition balls, the number of other winning opening acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquisition balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 26 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 24 (B) and 24 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of acquired balls for the accessory> the total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the accessory ratio is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13173, the emission brightness of each LED element of the segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a configuration of a driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds the data for 16 bits, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 34), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 32), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 32), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 33) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) is to be displayed.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 00100000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ×××× B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000 ××. By inputting the data set to XXB, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration on the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 30A shows the main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 30 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 to form the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging the parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged at a position visible from the outside on the main control board 1310. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the components are mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a horizontally long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in the direction of being aligned with the accessory ratio display 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 30C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are used. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display direction of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are arranged as close to each other as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, as shown by the dotted line, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 31 (C) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317, and FIG. 31 (C) shows the mounting example shown in FIG. 31 (B). It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are arranged. Arranged (so that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, every time a predetermined condition (for example, the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected, a switching button is detected) It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 34 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, that is, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 32). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display is also turned off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, the "display" includes any of the states of the 7-segment LED being fully lit, some segments being lit, and all being extinguished.

A display example in each of the above-described states will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 35 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 35B, this predetermined display may display "-" in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lighting state (lighting according to the input data) is set. Specifically, the accessory ratio is displayed, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 35 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 35 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 35 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode, as long as it can be distinguished from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 35 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the drawing, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from the normal bonus display in order to indicate that the bonus ratio display is not possible.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of accessory ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and a liquid crystal display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display content (proporty ratio or continuous bonus ratio, latest data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so that the display is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C). The medium-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the accessory ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (the number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 52) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the number of foul balls, and the number of out balls (number of launched balls) is calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor. It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric power support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball ejection performance from the design value during operation on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 provides information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting prize opening 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize). , The number of prizes in the large prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the accessory ratio display is started, displayed for a predetermined time, and then turned off. If the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. You may. That is, even if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. The bonus ratio to is displayed in the last two digits. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the continuous accessory ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. May be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 36 (B)). Furthermore, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data). Display) (FIG. 36 (C)). When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the first two-digit display switches to y6, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered. It may be displayed in two digits (medium-term data display) (FIG. 36 (D)).

The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a bonus ratio display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the gaming machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine, and to confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

Further, since the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control device 13MPU1311, the data of the accurate number of prize balls is retained and the accurate combination is obtained. You can calculate the object ratio.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not accidentally deleted by the operation of the staff in the amusement park. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. Further, since the playground cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), a lottery is performed by a random number and a special symbol variation display game is executed. do. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holds is large). Or, there is a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be performed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when the predetermined conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. If the number) changes), it is better to calculate the base value and update the display. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 37 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio display but a base display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 27, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “accessory ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 of FIG. 22 is read as the “base calculation area update process”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. The explanation will be read as "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 25 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". The description will be described by replacing "data for calculating / displaying accessory ratio 13136" with "data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 38, the total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls in order to calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle is performed (step S814), and the number of out balls is calculated. Is used to directly update the total number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support may be included.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 43.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls have won in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning in the starting winning opening is not suspended, the winning balls will be paid out, so the total number of winning balls will be updated. NS. In addition, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 51) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 38, the total number of prize balls used in the base calculation is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 51) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 38, the total number of out spheres used in the base calculation is updated each time an out sphere is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the examples described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize in a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 38, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls during the special prize and the number of out balls. Then, the base value may be calculated by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening and counting the number of out balls.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 39, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying a base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, at each stage, self-deprecating comments may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm feeling down", "I'm not bad", "It's amazing in a sense". If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for which base notification is not possible may be generated.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, the timing at which the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, as in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 46, 48, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls). good.

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 55 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from the display selection tables (see FIGS. 63 to 67) that differ depending on the base value.

In addition, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in a different manner depending on whether the base value exceeds a predetermined threshold value or decreases.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. No. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be performed are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value is long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for the operation of the hall is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

In addition, if the launched game ball has not won a prize in the starting winning opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal display. A notice effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change in the base value, or a change in the base value) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win the starting prize opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average number of past prizes are won), the base value will increase. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 40: Calculation of the number of prize balls-> Update the number of prize balls-> Calculate the base value-> Send the payout command-Fig. 41: Calculate the number of prize balls-> Update the number of prize balls-> Send the payout command-> Calculate the base value-Fig. 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 43: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 40 to 43 are described later in addition to the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 39. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 41, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 22, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the indicated position, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 22, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are performed after the output data setting process (step S90). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 22, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received (step S81). Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, since the data on the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 22, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed. The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used in the calculation of the base, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 42, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls during the special prize may not be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification due to the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether or not the prize ball is a special prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the prize to the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these triggers, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 46, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 38 and Fig. 39: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 45 and Fig. 46: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 47 and Fig. 48: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 49 and Fig. 50: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 45, the same step number as the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 38) is assigned the same step number, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). The number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the amusement park each time the number of prize balls is added to the buffer, or when the number of prize balls described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. The threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormal number of prize balls means that a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, if it is. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, a sound, or the like. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display, information output from an external terminal board, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is used as a base. It may be used to calculate the value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, after temporarily stopping the game (for example, stopping the variable display of the special symbol), after stopping the error notification, the game returns to the original state and the game is restarted. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win in the general winning opening or the starting winning opening. It is desirable that the mode of notification is a gentle mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower amount of light than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 45, it was determined in step S815 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls of the general winning opening and the starting winning opening, the out balls are won at a high ratio (for example, 50% or more). For example, if you are doing so.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 46, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 39), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of prize balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls is configured with 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold value Th1 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 46), the number of prize balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold value is Th1 or more.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Leave (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), store the other part in the memory (add the threshold value Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it for the base calculation. Execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used in the base calculation when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. Therefore, the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of prize balls of the big hit. Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of out balls is 0, the base value is calculated, but it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In either case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

As will be described later in FIG. 51, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, in a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) do not win a prize in the general winning openings 2001 and the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the abnormality of winning in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001 and starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value is reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball. can. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 47, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 47, the total number of prize balls used in the base calculation is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.). , The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting winning opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting winning opening is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100). ) Is not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, it can be selected by the operation button 220C. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the start winning opening is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in association with the winning of the starting prize opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if you win a prize in the starting prize opening or general winning opening, if it is treated as if there was no prize and the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted and it will be based depending on the prize. The value is not updated.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 48, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 47) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 48), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold value is Th2 or more.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold value Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold value Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 49, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball buffer. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 50, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 50, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 38, 45, 46, 47, and 47) executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 45, 47, 49, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process can be shared even for game machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 51 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the case where the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting winning opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls based on the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 54 and 55). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 70 and 71). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 51 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base shown in FIG. 51 (B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 51 (B) shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51 (B), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 51 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The write pointer may be moved when the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 51 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 51 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 35 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 35 (B)), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. In this way, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When calculating the base value on the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control device 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control device 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is changed to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the gaming ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in the so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, and the gaming machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the amount of light of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who intends to play on an empty platform can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win in the starting winning opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value is recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are launched, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn with revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or increase the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is decreased or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. good. For example, during the energy saving mode, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an effect operation button that changes the effect that appears, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and power to the gaming machine When the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the supply / non-supply) is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the amount of light of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display on which the base value is displayed, reduce the light amount of the lamp etc. that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display on which the base value is displayed. It may be turned off or off. In this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. Further, the indicator on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the amount of light of the indicator on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. Sometimes you may want to display a self-deprecating comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Base calculation using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 53 and Fig. 39: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 54 and Fig. 55: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 53 to 55.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 52 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of mouth-passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a passing through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of out balls. Further, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 53 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 53, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 53, the total number of prize balls used in the base calculation is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 53, the total number of out balls used in the base calculation is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 45, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 53, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 39.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 53, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out port and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the number of out balls buffer and the number of winning balls buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the number of winning balls with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the process of paying out the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 55, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. In addition, steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value of the number of out balls + the buffer value of the number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 55, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of balls passing through the out port to calculate the number of out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 56: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 57: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. When the player is notified of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 57, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 53, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an example of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value at predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 59).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is calculated by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

63 to 67 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game by the random numbers selected when the start winning opening is won (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 67 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (missing) shown in FIG. 63 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is wrong and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (1 hit) shown in FIG. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probability change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 65 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 66 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 67 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

If the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for a change in the base value) at the time of time or descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's feeling of tension continues and fatigue accumulates. If a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game is started when the starting winning opening is won, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. be. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 68 (A) is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 68B is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 68C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 68 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 68 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the vertical tendency of the base value.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. May be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In pachinko machines, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is likely to win during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, a game that shoots a game ball aiming at the same place as the so-called normal hit and aims at the big prize opening 2005, or a game that aims at the big prize opening 2006 by so-called right-handed hit that strengthens the firing strength to the maximum There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a start winning opening and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that strikes right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball in the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the open large prize opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, a general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the big winning opening 2006 is not won, the general winning opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting prize opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, for 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls paid out), it is unlikely that a game ball that has flowed into the game area but will win a prize at the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning a large winning opening). When counted as a number (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 69 and Fig. 39: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 70 and Fig. 71: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 69 to 71.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 69, the number of winning balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 69, the total number of prize balls used in the base calculation is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning number of balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball number from the out ball number is added to the total out ball number (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 69, the total number of out balls used in the base calculation is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 45, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 69, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 39.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 71, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 71, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning port, so that the deviation from the actual base value is large. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the large winning opening 2006 in the pachinko machine that hits right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by hitting normally during the big hit. It can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting port or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, there are large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that do not normally accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the mouths 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 38. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and the normal symbol is confirmed and opened (opening) until the second start port 2004. The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls, with the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) as a special prize. When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only during the time saving, but all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened working hours, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 38.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed in a state where neither the big hit nor the time is shortened (so-called normal state), and to play the game by right-handed during the big hit or the time is shortened. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning a left-handed hit, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 for winning a right-handed hit are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason described above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value at right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than that at left-handed). , When the player hits right under normal conditions, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a game machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in pachinko machines that are judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting winning opening that acts on the base when hitting left. And make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit left with a gaming machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handed hit is not different from what the hole expected, the hole misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win at the time of left-handed hit. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to such malicious intent of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that hits right during a short time, the second start port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second start port 2004 are at the time of right hit. It is placed in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port). After passing through the gate portion 2003 (or before and after), the number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots may not be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or it may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the amusement park that the player is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the player hits right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[10. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 25, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[10-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. An image display body 4500 that displays and displays information according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces sound, and the like are provided above the front member 4200. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 74), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form the drive source of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, it becomes possible to adopt a small motor as a drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display units of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (middle line), a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower stage-middle reel 4301b middle stage-right reel 4301c upper stage ( (Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (right-down line) is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether or not the prize (role) is established.

When a prize is established, three predetermined symbols may be lined up on the effective line, or three predetermined symbols may be lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the enableable lines (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines where the symbols can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to stop the symbols (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the middle line is added to the upper and lower lines, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and downward right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion projecting to the front side is formed below the design display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation unit 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal insertion slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The single insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

Below the operation unit 4202, a refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet number by the single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (stored medal) to the medal tray 4201. If medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of the replay prize (replay prize), or if the number of medals exceeds a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, the medals are also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation, respectively.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) forming a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 74) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio indicator 1317 and an accessory ratio display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and payout number display LED4562. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect) It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to the addition accompanying the establishment of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the refund button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guidance.

[10-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio display 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a bonus ratio display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input from these devices to the main board 4600. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e in the discharge port for detecting the paid out medals one by one, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs a control signal to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the drive signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, etc. to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, "+ 5V"), DC + 12V (hereinafter, "+ 12V"), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, "+ 24V"). The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with the above.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301 is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V as a motor drive voltage is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be hung is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) indicates that the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is used. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, the total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out.

[10-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 23, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as ROM4602 or RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[10-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 5100. The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

In the second control area, a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like are stored. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) that is not used for game control is stored is the debug (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating a bonus ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as a bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas continuous with the previous and next quarantine areas. For example, the start address of the first quarantine area is next to the end address of the first control area. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first quarantine area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 29, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) area in FIG. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[10-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

Addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH" are assigned to the RAM area 5200. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing the game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). The work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily be used. May be good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can maintain more independence.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between, and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address (“307FH”) immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 76 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area, in addition to the main area for storing the calculation result of the accessory ratio. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 79), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is cut off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 77 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of medals paid out while the continuous winning ball is operating (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonuses paid out by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 77 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total number of games in FIG. 77 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 79), and the bonus ratio is updated. , The continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 80).

FIG. 77 (B) shows the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one lag behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of replays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games in the case of n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative and total cumulative totals of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 255 can be stored in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the description in FIG. 77 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of prizes paid out is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are determined by the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 79). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 80).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 77 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). However, the data is not erased at other times. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 77 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[10-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O region 5300 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a grand prize opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[10-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 78, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. In FIG. 78, the definitions of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio are not shown, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 78, it does not have to be continuous as a setting area. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, the program can be executed from the startup processing and the initial setting can be executed again by accessing the quarantine area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pachinko machine plays games in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of a slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 5400 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[10-4. Game control]
[10-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset startup process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 76) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) (or other use) area, respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 80, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In this embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is executed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the gaming machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power failure flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 80) restores the process to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the game control work area because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs will remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is provided. Targeting the checksum calculation may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information about reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the stop of each reel is output in the symbol stop process. When the (inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination displayed as stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of information on the number of sheets, information on the output signal related to the number of payouts at the time of payout (number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process before the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been cleared, and the like. The game settings are checked.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 can accept the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes a symbol stop process for processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the winning combination determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is won, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the accessory ratio of the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 76, see FIG. 77) (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[10-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 76. As described above, since the periodic processing is interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process to call the accessory ratio calculation work. The bonus ratio is calculated by referring to the number of medals paid out stored in the area. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 23 and 24) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation of. In addition, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 triggered by the operation of the bonus ratio display switch 1318. You may.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by software processing. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the update processing of the soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During the execution of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[10-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and save the values of all the registers to the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the debug (inspection function) evacuation area, and is allocated to a different area separated from the game control evacuation area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 within the process. When writing is required, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, independence from other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processes from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Output different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the debug (inspection function) area. (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a signal in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the game machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the gaming and does not impair the fairness of the gaming. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the callee is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 20 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described embodiment of the pachinko machine, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be obtained. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are equivalent. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main controller
Data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises setting whether to use a synchronization method, a communication rate, a parity, or a stop bit for serial communication with the driver circuit after the power is turned on. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the computation even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a data storage amount for determining a timing for transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device, so that the length of the main control device, the display device and the driver is longer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of a game ball launched toward a game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
The winning openings include a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least with the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory, and stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous accessory ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the bonus ball ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine modified to a state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area, the game discharged from the game machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received by the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is updated.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) Provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area). , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby causing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises moving the predetermined number to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the restrictions of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Count the number of balls consumed by the player and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(17D) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated, stored in the buffer, and stored.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out spheres, thereby causing the total out spheres from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Taking the opportunity of winning a prize at the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning balls to the starting winning opening are not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine, which is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is visibly provided in the case of the control means from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in sales of halls can be suppressed.

(19A)
A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
Each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game execution means. Described game machine.

(19B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means said, as the predetermined condition, at any timing of detecting a prize to the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means
Control the transition to the low power mode, which reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) Displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game, the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Game machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of game value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by the above.

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, a start port that is an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the start port. At least there is a passageway
The control means
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the determination of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched into the game area is excluded from the number of game balls that have won a prize at the start port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine including peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information regarding the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information on the game value is based on
The main control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with a timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls.
The information about the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and the increase / decrease of the information about the game ball is determined.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by the player at a predetermined timing, and a means for acquiring the number of prize balls.
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
The control means
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
An out port detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out port provided at the bottom of the game area, and an out port detecting means.
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detecting means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the number of winning balls is counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the counted number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means that counts the number of game balls ejected from the game machine.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state.
A means for counting the number of prize balls, excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening, and a means for counting the number of prize balls.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information on the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening that is considered to be able to win.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period of time after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by the above.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Design fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display unit 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Effect control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A prize ball detection means for detecting that a prize has been won in a prize opening that grants a predetermined number of prize balls, and
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
The control means
When the detection by the prize ball detecting means and the detection by the consumption ball detecting means occur in one timer interrupt process, it is possible to count the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls in the one timer interrupt process. ,
When the result counted in the one timer interrupt process is reflected and the process cannot be performed in the one timer interrupt process, the counted result is reflected based on a predetermined priority.
A gaming machine characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated using the reflected result.

Images